2009-03-20 14:57:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								/**************************************************************************
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** This file is part of Qt Creator
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-01-26 18:33:46 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Copyright (c) 2012 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-11-02 15:59:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 14:17:16 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-02-25 09:15:00 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 14:17:16 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-04-13 08:42:33 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software Foundation and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the packaging of this file.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Please review the following information to ensure the GNU Lesser General
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Public License version 2.1 requirements will be met:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 14:17:16 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-12-17 16:01:08 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-04-13 08:42:33 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-12-17 16:01:08 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-04-13 08:42:33 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Other Usage
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Alternatively, this file may be used in accordance with the terms and
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** conditions contained in a signed written agreement between you and Nokia.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-12-17 16:01:08 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-11-02 15:59:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-02-25 09:15:00 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								**************************************************************************/
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								/*
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Copyright 2005 Roberto Raggi <roberto@kdevelop.org>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  documentation.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  KDEVELOP TEAM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								  CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								*/
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include "pp.h"
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-05-15 16:01:02 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include "pp-cctype.h"
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 15:08:31 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <Control.h>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <Lexer.h>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <Token.h>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-02 19:03:07 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <Literals.h>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-19 18:15:33 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <cctype>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-02 19:03:07 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <QtDebug>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:57:59 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <algorithm>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-02-15 10:42:41 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <QList>
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <QDate>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#include <QTime>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#define NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#ifndef NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#  include <iostream>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#endif // NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								namespace {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								enum {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    eagerExpansion = 1,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    MAX_TOKEN_EXPANSION_COUNT = 5000
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								namespace {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								template<typename _T>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class ScopedSwap
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    _T oldValue;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    _T &ref;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								public:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ScopedSwap(_T &var, _T newValue)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        : oldValue(newValue)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        , ref(var)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::swap(ref, oldValue);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ~ScopedSwap()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::swap(ref, oldValue);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								typedef ScopedSwap<bool> ScopedBoolSwap;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								typedef ScopedSwap<unsigned> ScopedUnsignedSwap;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								} // anonymous namespace
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								namespace CPlusPlus {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								namespace Internal {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								struct TokenBuffer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    std::list<PPToken> tokens;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const Macro *macro;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    TokenBuffer *next;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<QByteArray> blockedMacros;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    template <typename _Iterator>
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    TokenBuffer(_Iterator firstToken, _Iterator lastToken, const Macro *macro, TokenBuffer *next)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        : tokens(firstToken, lastToken), macro(macro), next(next)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    bool isBlocked(const QByteArray ¯oName) const {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        for (const TokenBuffer *it = this; it; it = it->next)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (it->blockedMacros.contains(macroName))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    void blockMacro(const QByteArray ¯oName)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { blockedMacros.append(macroName); }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								struct Value
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    enum Kind {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Kind_Long,
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-27 21:47:03 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Kind_ULong
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    };
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Kind kind;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    union {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        long l;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        unsigned long ul;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    };
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        : kind(Kind_Long), l(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline bool is_ulong () const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return kind == Kind_ULong; }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline void set_ulong (unsigned long v)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        ul = v;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        kind = Kind_ULong;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline void set_long (long v)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        l = v;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        kind = Kind_Long;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline bool is_zero () const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return l == 0; }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#define PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(name, op) \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline Value operator op(const Value &other) const \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Value v = *this; \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (v.is_ulong () || other.is_ulong ()) \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            v.set_ulong (v.ul op other.ul); \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            v.set_long (v.l op other.l); \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return v; \
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_add, +)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_sub, -)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_mult, *)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_div, /)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_mod, %)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_lhs, <<)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_rhs, >>)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_lt, <)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_gt, >)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_le, <=)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_ge, >=)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_eq, ==)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_ne, !=)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_bit_and, &)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_bit_or, |)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_bit_xor, ^)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_and, &&)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP(op_or, ||)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#undef PP_DEFINE_BIN_OP
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								} // namespace Internal
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-02-04 09:52:39 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								} // namespace CPlusPlus
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								using namespace CPlusPlus;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								using namespace CPlusPlus::Internal;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								namespace {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								inline bool isValidToken(const PPToken &tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return tk.isNot(T_EOF_SYMBOL) && (! tk.newline() || tk.joined());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Macro *macroDefinition(const QByteArray &name, unsigned offset, Environment *env, Client *client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-09-25 16:00:14 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Macro *m = env->resolve(name);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (client) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            client->passedMacroDefinitionCheck(offset, *m);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            client->failedMacroDefinitionCheck(offset, name);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return m;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-09-25 16:00:14 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class RangeLexer
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const Token *first;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const Token *last;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Token trivial;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								public:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline RangeLexer(const Token *first, const Token *last)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        : first(first), last(last)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        // WARN: `last' must be a valid iterator.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        trivial.offset = last->offset;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline operator bool() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return first != last; }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline bool isValid() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return first != last; }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline int size() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return std::distance(first, last); }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline const Token *dot() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { return first; }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline const Token &operator*() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (first != last)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return *first;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return trivial;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline const Token *operator->() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (first != last)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return first;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return &trivial;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline RangeLexer &operator++()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        ++first;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return *this;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								class ExpressionEvaluator
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ExpressionEvaluator(const ExpressionEvaluator &other);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    void operator = (const ExpressionEvaluator &other);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								public:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-09-25 16:00:14 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ExpressionEvaluator(Client *client, Environment *env)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        : client(client), env(env), _lex(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value operator()(const Token *firstToken, const Token *lastToken,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                     const QByteArray &source)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        this->source = source;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const Value previousValue = switchValue(Value());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        RangeLexer tmp(firstToken, lastToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        RangeLexer *previousLex = _lex;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        _lex = &tmp;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        process_expression();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        _lex = previousLex;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return switchValue(previousValue);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								protected:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value switchValue(const Value &value)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Value previousValue = _value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        _value = value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return previousValue;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    bool isTokenDefined() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if ((*_lex)->isNot(T_IDENTIFIER))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const QByteArray spell = tokenSpell();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (spell.size() != 7)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return spell == "defined";
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray tokenSpell() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const QByteArray text = QByteArray::fromRawData(source.constData() + (*_lex)->offset,
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-27 21:47:03 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        (*_lex)->f.length);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return text;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline void process_expression()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    { process_constant_expression(); }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    void process_primary()
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-10 15:44:47 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if ((*_lex)->is(T_NUMERIC_LITERAL)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-10 10:47:26 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            int base = 10;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-04-29 12:33:05 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            QByteArray spell = tokenSpell();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-10 10:47:26 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (spell.at(0) == '0') {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (spell.size() > 1 && (spell.at(1) == 'x' || spell.at(1) == 'X'))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    base = 16;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                else
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    base = 8;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-04-29 12:33:05 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            while (! spell.isEmpty()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const QChar ch = spell.at(spell.length() - 1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (! (ch == QLatin1Char('u') || ch == QLatin1Char('U') ||
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                       ch == QLatin1Char('l') || ch == QLatin1Char('L')))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                spell.chop(1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value.set_long(spell.toLong(0, base));
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (isTokenDefined()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if ((*_lex)->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                _value.set_long(macroDefinition(tokenSpell(), (*_lex)->offset, env, client) != 0);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_LPAREN)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if ((*_lex)->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    _value.set_long(macroDefinition(tokenSpell(), (*_lex)->offset, env, client) != 0);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if ((*_lex)->is(T_RPAREN)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value.set_long(0);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_MINUS)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value.set_long(- _value.l);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_PLUS)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-04-27 09:55:19 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_TILDE)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value.set_long(~ _value.l);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_EXCLAIM)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value.set_long(_value.is_zero());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if ((*_lex)->is(T_LPAREN)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_expression();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if ((*_lex)->is(T_RPAREN))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value process_expression_with_operator_precedence(const Value &lhs, int minPrecedence)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        Value result = lhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        while (precedence((*_lex)->kind()) >= minPrecedence) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const int oper = (*_lex)->kind();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const int operPrecedence = precedence(oper);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            Value rhs = _value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            for (int LA_token_kind = (*_lex)->kind(), LA_precedence = precedence(LA_token_kind);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 17:05:13 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    LA_precedence > operPrecedence && isBinaryOperator(LA_token_kind);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    LA_token_kind = (*_lex)->kind(), LA_precedence = precedence(LA_token_kind)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                rhs = process_expression_with_operator_precedence(rhs, LA_precedence);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            result = evaluate_expression(oper, result, rhs);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    void process_constant_expression()
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        process_primary();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        _value = process_expression_with_operator_precedence(_value, precedence(T_PIPE_PIPE));
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if ((*_lex)->is(T_QUESTION)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const Value cond = _value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            process_constant_expression();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            Value left = _value, right;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if ((*_lex)->is(T_COLON)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++(*_lex);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                process_constant_expression();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                right = _value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            _value = ! cond.is_zero() ? left : right;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								private:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    inline int precedence(int tokenKind) const
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        switch (tokenKind) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE_PIPE:       return 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER_AMPER:     return 1;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE:            return 2;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_CARET:           return 3;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER:           return 4;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EQUAL_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EXCLAIM_EQUAL:   return 5;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_EQUAL:   return 6;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_LESS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_GREATER: return 7;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PLUS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_MINUS:           return 8;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_STAR:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_SLASH:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PERCENT:         return 9;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        default:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return -1;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static inline bool isBinaryOperator(int tokenKind)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        switch (tokenKind) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE_PIPE:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER_AMPER:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_CARET:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EQUAL_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EXCLAIM_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_EQUAL:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_LESS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_GREATER:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PLUS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_MINUS:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_STAR:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_SLASH:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PERCENT:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        default:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static inline Value evaluate_expression(int tokenKind, const Value &lhs, const Value &rhs)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-28 15:22:36 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        switch (tokenKind) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE_PIPE:       return lhs || rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER_AMPER:     return lhs && rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PIPE:            return lhs | rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_CARET:           return lhs ^ rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_AMPER:           return lhs & rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EQUAL_EQUAL:     return lhs == rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_EXCLAIM_EQUAL:   return lhs != rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER:         return lhs > rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS:            return lhs < rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_EQUAL:      return lhs <= rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_EQUAL:   return lhs >= rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_LESS_LESS:       return lhs << rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_GREATER_GREATER: return lhs >> rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PLUS:            return lhs + rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_MINUS:           return lhs - rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_STAR:            return lhs * rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_SLASH:           return rhs.is_zero() ? Value() : lhs / rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        case T_PERCENT:         return rhs.is_zero() ? Value() : lhs % rhs;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        default:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return Value();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								private:
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-09-25 16:00:14 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Client *client;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Environment *env;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray source;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    RangeLexer *_lex;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value _value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								};
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								} // end of anonymous namespace
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Preprocessor::State::State()
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    : m_lexer(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_skipping(MAX_LEVEL)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_trueTest(MAX_LEVEL)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_ifLevel(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_tokenBuffer(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_inPreprocessorDirective(false)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_result(0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_markGeneratedTokens(true)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_noLines(false)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_inCondition(false)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_inDefine(false)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_skipping[m_ifLevel] = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_trueTest[m_ifLevel] = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Preprocessor::Preprocessor(Client *client, Environment *env)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    : m_client(client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_env(env)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_expandMacros(true)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    , m_keepComments(false)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::pushState(const State &newState)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_savedStates.append(m_state);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state = newState;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 11:40:53 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::popState()
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const State &s = m_savedStates.last();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    delete m_state.m_lexer;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state = s;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_savedStates.removeLast();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								QByteArray Preprocessor::operator()(const QString &fileName, const QString &source)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QString previousOriginalSource = m_originalSource;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_originalSource = source;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray bytes = source.toLatin1();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray preprocessedCode = operator()(fileName, bytes);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_originalSource = previousOriginalSource;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return preprocessedCode;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								QByteArray Preprocessor::operator()(const QString &fileName,
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                    const QByteArray &source,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                    bool noLines,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                    bool markGeneratedTokens)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-02 11:30:43 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray preprocessed;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug()<<"running" << fileName<<"with"<<source.count('\n')<<"lines...";
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    preprocess(fileName, source, &preprocessed, noLines, markGeneratedTokens, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-02 11:30:43 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return preprocessed;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-04 20:54:31 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::expandMacros() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return m_expandMacros;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-04 20:54:31 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::setExpandMacros(bool expandMacros)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_expandMacros = expandMacros;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-04 20:54:31 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-23 14:05:47 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::keepComments() const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return m_keepComments;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-23 14:05:47 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::setKeepComments(bool keepComments)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_keepComments = keepComments;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-23 14:05:47 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								Preprocessor::State Preprocessor::createStateFromSource(const QString &fileName,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        const QByteArray &source,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        QByteArray *result,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        bool noLines,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        bool markGeneratedTokens,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                                        bool inCondition) const
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    State state;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_currentFileName = fileName;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_source = source;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_lexer = new Lexer(source.constBegin(), source.constEnd());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_lexer->setScanKeywords(false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_lexer->setScanAngleStringLiteralTokens(false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_keepComments)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        state.m_lexer->setScanCommentTokens(true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_result = result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_noLines = noLines;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_markGeneratedTokens = markGeneratedTokens;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    state.m_inCondition = inCondition;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return state;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleDefined(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    unsigned lineno = tk->lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "defined" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    bool lparenSeen = tk->is(T_LPAREN);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (lparenSeen)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // consume "(" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->isNot(T_IDENTIFIER))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        //### TODO: generate error message
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken idToken = *tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    do {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk->isNot(T_POUND_POUND))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            idToken = generateConcatenated(idToken, *tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } while (isValidToken(*tk));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    pushToken(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray result(1, '0');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_env->resolve(idToken.asByteArrayRef()))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        result[0] = '1';
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    *tk = generateToken(T_NUMERIC_LITERAL, ByteArrayRef(&result), lineno, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::pushToken(Preprocessor::PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const PPToken currentTokenBuffer[] = { *tk };
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_tokenBuffer = new TokenBuffer(currentTokenBuffer,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                            currentTokenBuffer + 1,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                            /*macro */ 0,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                            m_state.m_tokenBuffer);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::lex(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								_Lagain:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_state.m_tokenBuffer) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_state.m_tokenBuffer->tokens.empty()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            TokenBuffer *r = m_state.m_tokenBuffer;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_tokenBuffer = m_state.m_tokenBuffer->next;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            delete r;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            goto _Lagain;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        *tk = m_state.m_tokenBuffer->tokens.front();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_tokenBuffer->tokens.pop_front();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        tk->setSource(m_state.m_source);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_lexer->scan(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->isValid() && !tk->generated() && !tk->is(T_EOF_SYMBOL))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_env->currentLine = tk->lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								_Lclassify:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (! m_state.m_inPreprocessorDirective) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk->newline() && tk->is(T_POUND)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handlePreprocessorDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            goto _Lclassify;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (tk->newline() && skipping()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ScopedBoolSwap s(m_state.m_inPreprocessorDirective, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            do {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } while (isValidToken(*tk));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            goto _Lclassify;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER) && !isQtReservedWord(tk->asByteArrayRef())) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            static const QByteArray ppDefined("defined");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (m_state.m_inCondition && tk->asByteArrayRef() == ppDefined)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                handleDefined(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            else if (handleIdentifier(tk))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                goto _Lagain;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::skipPreprocesorDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-16 15:16:06 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ScopedBoolSwap s(m_state.m_inPreprocessorDirective, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    while (isValidToken(*tk)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-16 15:16:06 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::handleIdentifier(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 14:00:56 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ScopedBoolSwap s(m_state.m_inPreprocessorDirective, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppLine("__LINE__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppFile("__FILE__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppDate("__DATE__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppTime("__TIME__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ByteArrayRef macroNameRef = tk->asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    bool newline = tk->newline();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (!m_state.m_inDefine && macroNameRef.size() == 8 && macroNameRef[0] == '_' && macroNameRef[1] == '_') {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        PPToken newTk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (macroNameRef == ppLine) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            QByteArray txt = QByteArray::number(tk->lineno);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk = generateToken(T_STRING_LITERAL, &txt, tk->lineno, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (macroNameRef == ppFile) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            QByteArray txt;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append(m_env->currentFile.toUtf8());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk = generateToken(T_STRING_LITERAL, &txt, tk->lineno, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (macroNameRef == ppDate) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            QByteArray txt;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append(QDate::currentDate().toString().toUtf8());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk = generateToken(T_STRING_LITERAL, &txt, tk->lineno, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (macroNameRef == ppTime) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            QByteArray txt;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append(QTime::currentTime().toString().toUtf8());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            txt.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk = generateToken(T_STRING_LITERAL, &txt, tk->lineno, false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 14:00:56 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (newTk.isValid()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk.f.newline = newline;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            newTk.f.whitespace = tk->whitespace();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            *tk = newTk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 14:00:56 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray macroName = macroNameRef.toByteArray();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->generated() && m_state.m_tokenBuffer && m_state.m_tokenBuffer->isBlocked(macroName))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 14:00:56 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Macro *macro = m_env->resolve(macroName);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (!macro)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug() << "expanding" << macro->name() << "on line" << tk->lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-03 14:09:38 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_client->startExpandingMacro(tk->offset, *macro, macroName);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<PPToken> body = macro->definitionTokens();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-03 14:09:38 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (macro->isFunctionLike()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (!expandMacros() || !handleFunctionLikeMacro(tk, macro, body, !m_state.m_inDefine))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // the call is not function like or expandMacros() returns false, so stop
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-03 14:09:38 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-30 14:29:40 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (body.isEmpty()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (!m_state.m_inDefine) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // macro expanded to empty, so characters disappeared, hence force a re-indent.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            PPToken forceWhitespacingToken;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // special case: for a macro that expanded to empty, we do not want
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // to generate a new #line and re-indent, but just generate the
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // amount of spaces that the macro name took up.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            forceWhitespacingToken.f.length = tk->length() + (tk->whitespace() ? 1 : 0);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            body.push_front(forceWhitespacingToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-30 14:29:40 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        PPToken &firstNewTk = body.first();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        firstNewTk.f.newline = newline;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        firstNewTk.f.whitespace = true; // the macro call is removed, so space the first token correctly.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-30 14:29:40 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_tokenBuffer = new TokenBuffer(body.begin(), body.end(),
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                           macro, m_state.m_tokenBuffer);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_tokenBuffer->blockMacro(macroName);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-30 14:29:40 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_client->stopExpandingMacro(tk->offset, *macro);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-08-30 14:29:40 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::handleFunctionLikeMacro(PPToken *tk, const Macro *macro, QVector<PPToken> &body, bool addWhitespaceMarker)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppVaArgs("__VA_ARGS__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<QVector<PPToken> > actuals;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken idToken = *tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (!collectActualArguments(tk, &actuals)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        pushToken(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        *tk = idToken;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:27:02 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<PPToken> expanded;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    for (size_t i = 0, bodySize = body.size(); i < bodySize && expanded.size() < MAX_TOKEN_EXPANSION_COUNT; ++i) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        int expandedSize = expanded.size();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const PPToken &token = body[i];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (token.is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const ByteArrayRef id = token.asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const QVector<QByteArray> &formals = macro->formals();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            int j = 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            for (; j < formals.size() && expanded.size() < MAX_TOKEN_EXPANSION_COUNT; ++j) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (formals[j] == id) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (actuals.size() <= j) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        // too few actual parameters
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        //### TODO: error message
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        goto exitNicely;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-09 17:52:31 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-01-19 15:26:08 +10:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    QVector<PPToken> actualsForThisParam = actuals[j];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (id == ppVaArgs || (macro->isVariadic() && j + 1 == formals.size())) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        unsigned lineno = 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        QByteArray comma(",");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        ByteArrayRef commaRef(&comma);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        for (int k = j + 1; k < actuals.size(); ++k) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            if (!actualsForThisParam.isEmpty())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                lineno = actualsForThisParam.last().lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            actualsForThisParam.append(generateToken(T_COMMA, commaRef, lineno, true));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            actualsForThisParam += actuals[k];
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-02-22 13:11:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 10:41:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (i > 0  && body[i - 1].is(T_POUND)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        QByteArray newText;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        newText.reserve(256);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        unsigned lineno = 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        for (int i = 0, ei = actualsForThisParam.size(); i < ei; ++i) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            const PPToken &t = actualsForThisParam.at(i);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            if (i == 0)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                lineno = t.lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            else if (t.whitespace())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                newText.append(' ');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                            newText.append(t.start(), t.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:06:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        newText.replace("\\", "\\\\");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        newText.replace("\"", "\\\"");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        expanded.push_back(generateToken(T_STRING_LITERAL, ByteArrayRef(&newText), lineno, true));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    } else  {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        expanded += actualsForThisParam;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:06:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:18:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (j == formals.size())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                expanded.push_back(token);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (token.isNot(T_POUND) && token.isNot(T_POUND_POUND)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            expanded.push_back(token);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 09:58:43 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (i > 1 && body[i - 1].is(T_POUND_POUND)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (expandedSize < 1 || expanded.size() == expandedSize) //### TODO: [cpp.concat] placemarkers
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                continue;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const PPToken &leftTk = expanded[expandedSize - 1];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            const PPToken &rightTk = expanded[expandedSize];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            expanded[expandedSize - 1] = generateConcatenated(leftTk, rightTk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            expanded.remove(expandedSize);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-12-09 16:01:20 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								exitNicely:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    pushToken(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (addWhitespaceMarker) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        PPToken forceWhitespacingToken;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        expanded.push_front(forceWhitespacingToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    body = expanded;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								/// invalid pp-tokens are used as markers to force whitespace checks.
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::preprocess(const QString &fileName, const QByteArray &source,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                              QByteArray *result, bool noLines,
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                              bool markGeneratedTokens, bool inCondition)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:59:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (source.isEmpty())
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:06:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    pushState(createStateFromSource(fileName, source, result, noLines, markGeneratedTokens, inCondition));
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:59:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QString previousFileName = m_env->currentFile;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_env->currentFile = fileName;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const unsigned previousCurrentLine = m_env->currentLine;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_env->currentLine = 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:59:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray fn = fileName.toUtf8();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken tk(m_state.m_source), prevTk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    unsigned lineno = 1;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    do {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								_Lrestart:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bool forceLine = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(&tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (!tk.isValid()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            bool wasGenerated = prevTk.generated();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            prevTk = tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            prevTk.f.generated = wasGenerated;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            goto _Lrestart;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_state.m_markGeneratedTokens && tk.generated() && !prevTk.generated()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            startNewOutputLine();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            out("#gen true\n");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            forceLine = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (m_state.m_markGeneratedTokens && !tk.generated() && prevTk.generated()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            startNewOutputLine();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            out("#gen false\n");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            forceLine = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (forceLine || lineno != tk.lineno) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (forceLine || lineno > tk.lineno || tk.lineno - lineno > 3) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (m_state.m_noLines) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (!m_state.m_markGeneratedTokens)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        out(' ');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    startNewOutputLine();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out("# ");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out(QByteArray::number(tk.lineno));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out(" \"");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out(fn);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out("\"\n");
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                for (unsigned i = lineno; i < tk.lineno; ++i)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out('\n');
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (tk.newline() && prevTk.isValid())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                out('\n');
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-04 11:47:30 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:59:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk.whitespace() || prevTk.generated() != tk.generated() || !prevTk.isValid()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (prevTk.generated() && tk.generated()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                out(' ');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } else if (tk.isValid() && !prevTk.isValid() && tk.lineno == lineno) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                out(QByteArray(prevTk.length() + (tk.whitespace() ? 1 : 0), ' '));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } else if (prevTk.generated() != tk.generated() || !prevTk.isValid()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *begin = tk.source().constBegin();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *end = begin + tk.offset;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *it = end - 1;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                for (; it >= begin; --it)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (*it == '\n')
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++it;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                for (; it < end; ++it)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out(' ');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *begin = tk.source().constBegin();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *end = begin + tk.offset;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                const char *it = end - 1;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                for (; it >= begin; --it)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    if (!pp_isspace(*it) || *it == '\n')
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                        break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                ++it;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                for (; it < end; ++it)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    out(*it);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:56:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const ByteArrayRef tkBytes = tk.asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        out(tkBytes);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lineno = tk.lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk.is(T_COMMENT) || tk.is(T_DOXY_COMMENT))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            lineno += tkBytes.count('\n');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        prevTk = tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } while (tk.isNot(T_EOF_SYMBOL));
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:56:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    popState();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:56:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_env->currentFile = previousFileName;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_env->currentLine = previousCurrentLine;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:56:55 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::collectActualArguments(PPToken *tk, QVector<QVector<PPToken> > *actuals)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:18:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Q_ASSERT(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Q_ASSERT(actuals);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 17:18:12 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume the identifier
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:46:21 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->isNot(T_LPAREN))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        //### TODO: error message
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:46:21 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<PPToken> tokens;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    scanActualArgument(tk, &tokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:46:21 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    actuals->append(tokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:19:03 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    while (tk->is(T_COMMA)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:19:03 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        QVector<PPToken> tokens;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        scanActualArgument(tk, &tokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        actuals->append(tokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 16:19:03 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->is(T_RPAREN))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    //###TODO: else error message
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::scanActualArgument(PPToken *tk, QVector<PPToken> *tokens)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Q_ASSERT(tokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    int count = 0;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    while (tk->isNot(T_EOF_SYMBOL)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk->is(T_LPAREN)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            ++count;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (tk->is(T_RPAREN)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (! count)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            --count;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (! count && tk->is(T_COMMA)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            break;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        tokens->append(*tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handlePreprocessorDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ScopedBoolSwap s(m_state.m_inPreprocessorDirective, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 09:52:50 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken poundToken = *tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // scan the directive
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 09:52:50 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->newline() && ! tk->joined())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return; // nothing to do.
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppDefine("define");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppIf("if");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppIfDef("ifdef");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppIfNDef("ifndef");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppEndIf("endif");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppElse("else");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppUndef("undef");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppElif("elif");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppInclude("include");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppIncludeNext("include_next");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray ppImport("import");
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    //### TODO:
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    // line
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    // error
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    // pragma
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const ByteArrayRef directive = tk->asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (!skipping() && directive == ppDefine)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleDefineDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (!skipping() && directive == ppUndef)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleUndefDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (!skipping() && (directive == ppInclude
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                 || directive == ppIncludeNext
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                                 || directive == ppImport))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleIncludeDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppIf)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleIfDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppIfDef)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleIfDefDirective(false, tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppIfNDef)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleIfDefDirective(true, tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppEndIf)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleEndIfDirective(tk, poundToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppElse)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleElseDirective(tk, poundToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (directive == ppElif)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            handleElifDirective(tk, poundToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        skipPreprocesorDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-03 09:52:50 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleIncludeDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_lexer->setScanAngleStringLiteralTokens(true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "include" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_lexer->setScanAngleStringLiteralTokens(false);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-29 17:14:42 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const unsigned line = tk->lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray included;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->is(T_STRING_LITERAL) || tk->is(T_ANGLE_STRING_LITERAL)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        included = tk->asByteArrayRef().toByteArray();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-29 17:14:42 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // consume string token
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        included = expand(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    included = included.trimmed();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug("include [[%s]]", included.toUtf8().constData());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Client::IncludeType mode;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (included.at(0) == '"')
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        mode = Client::IncludeLocal;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (included.at(0) == '<')
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        mode = Client::IncludeGlobal;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return; //### TODO: add error message?
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    included = included.mid(1, included.size() - 2);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QString inc = QString::fromUtf8(included.constData());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_client->sourceNeeded(inc, mode, line);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleDefineDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const unsigned defineOffset = tk->offset;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "define" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    bool hasIdentifier = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->isNot(T_IDENTIFIER))
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ScopedBoolSwap inDefine(m_state.m_inDefine, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Macro macro;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro.setFileName(m_env->currentFile);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro.setLine(m_env->currentLine);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray macroName = tk->asByteArrayRef().toByteArray();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro.setName(macroName);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro.setOffset(tk->offset);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (isValidToken(*tk) && tk->is(T_LPAREN) && ! tk->whitespace()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 13:55:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        macro.setFunctionLike(true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // skip `('
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (isValidToken(*tk) && tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-16 14:06:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            hasIdentifier = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            macro.addFormal(tk->asByteArrayRef().toByteArray());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            while (isValidToken(*tk) && tk->is(T_COMMA)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (isValidToken(*tk) && tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    macro.addFormal(tk->asByteArrayRef().toByteArray());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-16 14:06:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    hasIdentifier = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (tk->is(T_DOT_DOT_DOT)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 13:55:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            macro.setVariadic(true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-16 14:06:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (!hasIdentifier)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                macro.addFormal("__VA_ARGS__");
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            lex(tk); // consume elipsis token
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (isValidToken(*tk) && tk->is(T_RPAREN))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            lex(tk); // consume ")" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QVector<PPToken> bodyTokens;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken firstBodyToken = *tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    while (isValidToken(*tk)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        tk->f.generated = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bodyTokens.push_back(*tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (eagerExpansion)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            while (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER) && !isQtReservedWord(tk->asByteArrayRef()) && handleIdentifier(tk))
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (isQtReservedWord(ByteArrayRef(¯oName))) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 13:55:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        QByteArray macroId = macro.name();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (macro.isFunctionLike()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            macroId += '(';
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            bool fst = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-04-19 15:42:14 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            foreach (const QByteArray &formal, macro.formals()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 13:55:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (! fst)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    macroId += ", ";
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                fst = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                macroId += formal;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            macroId += ')';
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bodyTokens.clear();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        macro.setDefinition(macroId, bodyTokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-22 13:55:42 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        int start = firstBodyToken.offset;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        int len = tk->offset - start;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        QByteArray bodyText = firstBodyToken.source().mid(start, len).trimmed();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        for (int i = 0, count = bodyTokens.size(); i < count; ++i) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            PPToken &t = bodyTokens[i];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (t.isValid())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                t.squeeze();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2011-09-06 11:50:58 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        macro.setDefinition(bodyText, bodyTokens);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    macro.setLength(tk->offset - defineOffset);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_env->bind(macro);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug() << "adding macro" << macro.name() << "defined at" << macro.fileName() << ":"<<macro.line();
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_client->macroAdded(macro);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								QByteArray Preprocessor::expand(PPToken *tk, PPToken *lastConditionToken)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray condition;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    condition.reserve(256);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    while (isValidToken(*tk)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const ByteArrayRef s = tk->asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        condition.append(s.start(), s.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        condition += ' ';
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-29 17:14:42 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (lastConditionToken)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            *lastConditionToken = *tk;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug("*** Condition before: [%s]", condition.constData());
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    result.reserve(256);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    preprocess(m_state.m_currentFileName, condition, &result, true, false, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    result.squeeze();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//    qDebug("*** Condition after: [%s]", result.constData());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								const PPToken Preprocessor::evalExpression(PPToken *tk, Value &result)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken lastConditionToken;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray expanded = expand(tk, &lastConditionToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Lexer lexer(expanded.constData(), expanded.constData() + expanded.size());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    std::vector<Token> buf;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Token t;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    do {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lexer.scan(&t);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        buf.push_back(t);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } while (t.isNot(T_EOF_SYMBOL));
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ExpressionEvaluator eval(m_client, m_env);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    result = eval(&buf[0], &buf[buf.size() - 1], expanded);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return lastConditionToken;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleIfDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "if" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    Value result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const PPToken lastExpressionToken = evalExpression(tk, result);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const bool value = !result.is_zero();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const bool wasSkipping = m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    ++m_state.m_ifLevel;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel] = value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (wasSkipping) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = wasSkipping;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bool startSkipping = !value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = startSkipping;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (startSkipping && m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            startSkippingBlocks(lastExpressionToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleElifDirective(PPToken *tk, const PPToken £Token)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_state.m_ifLevel == 0) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								//        std::cerr << "*** WARNING #elif without #if" << std::endl;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        handleIfDirective(tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // consume "elif" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel - 1]) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // we keep on skipping because we are nested in a skipped block
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel]) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (!m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel]) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                // start skipping because the preceeding then-part was not skipped
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    startSkippingBlocks(poundToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // preceeding then-part was skipped, so calculate if we should start
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // skipping, depending on the condition
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            Value result;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            evalExpression(tk, result);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            bool startSkipping = result.is_zero();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel] = !startSkipping;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = startSkipping;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (m_client && !startSkipping)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                m_client->stopSkippingBlocks(poundToken.offset - 1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleElseDirective(PPToken *tk, const PPToken £Token)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "else" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-01-19 20:06:39 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_state.m_ifLevel != 0) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel - 1]) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // we keep on skipping because we are nested in a skipped block
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            bool wasSkipping = m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            bool startSkipping = m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = startSkipping;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (m_client && wasSkipping && !startSkipping)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                m_client->stopSkippingBlocks(poundToken.offset - 1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            else if (m_client && !wasSkipping && startSkipping)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                startSkippingBlocks(poundToken);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#ifndef NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::cerr << "*** WARNING #else without #if" << std::endl;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#endif // NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleEndIfDirective(PPToken *tk, const PPToken £Token)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_state.m_ifLevel == 0) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#ifndef NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::cerr << "*** WARNING #endif without #if";
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (!tk->generated())
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            std::cerr << " on line " << tk->lineno << " of file " << m_state.m_currentFileName.toUtf8().constData();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::cerr << std::endl;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#endif // NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    } else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bool wasSkipping = m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel] = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        --m_state.m_ifLevel;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_client && wasSkipping && !m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel])
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_client->stopSkippingBlocks(poundToken.offset - 1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "endif" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleIfDefDirective(bool checkUndefined, PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    static const QByteArray qCreatorRun("Q_CREATOR_RUN");
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "ifdef" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        bool value = false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const ByteArrayRef macroName = tk->asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (Macro *macro = macroDefinition(macroName.toByteArray(), tk->offset, m_env, m_client)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            value = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            // the macro is a feature constraint(e.g. QT_NO_XXX)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            if (checkUndefined && macroName.startsWith("QT_NO_")) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                if (macro->fileName() == QLatin1String("<configuration>")) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    // and it' defined in a pro file (e.g. DEFINES += QT_NO_QOBJECT)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                    value = false; // take the branch
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-12 15:24:45 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								                }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (m_env->isBuiltinMacro(macroName)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            value = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        } else if (macroName == qCreatorRun) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            value = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (checkUndefined)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            value = !value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const bool wasSkipping = m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel];
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        ++m_state.m_ifLevel;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_trueTest[m_state.m_ifLevel] = value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_state.m_skipping[m_state.m_ifLevel] = wasSkipping ? wasSkipping : !value;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_client && !wasSkipping && !value)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            startSkippingBlocks(*tk);
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // consume the identifier
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#ifndef NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::cerr << "*** WARNING #ifdef without identifier" << std::endl;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#endif // NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::handleUndefDirective(PPToken *tk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    lex(tk); // consume "undef" token
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (tk->is(T_IDENTIFIER)) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const ByteArrayRef macroName = tk->asByteArrayRef();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        const Macro *macro = m_env->remove(macroName.toByteArray());
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (m_client && macro)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_client->macroAdded(*macro);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        lex(tk); // consume macro name
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#ifndef NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        std::cerr << "*** WARNING #undef without identifier" << std::endl;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								#endif // NO_DEBUG
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								bool Preprocessor::isQtReservedWord(const ByteArrayRef ¯oId)
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const int size = macroId.size();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if      (size == 9 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_SIGNALS")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-03 09:11:52 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 9 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_FOREACH")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 7 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_SLOTS")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-03-25 11:50:17 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 8 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_SIGNAL")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 6 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_SLOT")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-11-30 16:30:21 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 3 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_D")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 3 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_Q")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-02-22 13:11:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 10 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_PROPERTY")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-12-08 15:08:03 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 18 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_PRIVATE_PROPERTY")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-02-22 13:11:09 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 7 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_ENUMS")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 7 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_FLAGS")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-03-16 17:29:40 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 12 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_INTERFACES")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2010-12-03 15:40:08 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 11 && macroId.at(0) == 'Q' && macroId == "Q_INVOKABLE")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 6 && macroId.at(0) == 'S' && macroId == "SIGNAL")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 4 && macroId.at(0) == 'S' && macroId == "SLOT")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 7 && macroId.at(0) == 's' && macroId == "signals")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-07-03 11:00:36 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 7 && macroId.at(0) == 'f' && macroId == "foreach")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    else if (size == 5 && macroId.at(0) == 's' && macroId == "slots")
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return false;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								QString Preprocessor::string(const char *first, int length) const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_originalSource.isEmpty())
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return QString::fromUtf8(first, length);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2012-03-26 15:18:01 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const int position = first - m_state.m_source.constData();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return m_originalSource.mid(position, length);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								PPToken Preprocessor::generateToken(enum Kind kind, const ByteArrayRef &content, unsigned lineno, bool addQuotes)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    size_t len = content.size();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const size_t pos = m_scratchBuffer.size();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (kind == T_STRING_LITERAL && addQuotes)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_scratchBuffer.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    m_scratchBuffer.append(content.start(), content.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (kind == T_STRING_LITERAL && addQuotes) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        m_scratchBuffer.append('"');
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        len += 2;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    PPToken tok(m_scratchBuffer);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    tok.f.kind = kind;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (m_state.m_lexer->control()) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (kind == T_STRING_LITERAL)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            tok.string = m_state.m_lexer->control()->stringLiteral(m_scratchBuffer.constData() + pos, len);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (kind == T_IDENTIFIER)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            tok.identifier = m_state.m_lexer->control()->identifier(m_scratchBuffer.constData() + pos, len);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        else if (kind == T_NUMERIC_LITERAL)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            tok.number = m_state.m_lexer->control()->numericLiteral(m_scratchBuffer.constData() + pos, len);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    tok.offset = pos;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    tok.f.length = len;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    tok.f.generated = true;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    tok.lineno = lineno;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return tok;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								PPToken Preprocessor::generateConcatenated(const PPToken &leftTk, const PPToken &rightTk)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    QByteArray newText;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    newText.reserve(leftTk.length() + rightTk.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    newText.append(leftTk.start(), leftTk.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    newText.append(rightTk.start(), rightTk.length());
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    return generateToken(T_IDENTIFIER, ByteArrayRef(&newText), leftTk.lineno, true);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								void Preprocessor::startSkippingBlocks(const Preprocessor::PPToken &tk) const
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								{
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    if (!m_client)
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        return;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    int iter = tk.end();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    const QByteArray &txt = tk.source();
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    for (; iter < txt.size(); ++iter) {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        if (txt.at(iter) == '\n') {
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            m_client->startSkippingBlocks(iter + 1);
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								            return;
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								        }
							 | 
						
					
						
							| 
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								    }
							 | 
						
					
						
							
								
									
										
										
										
											2009-06-15 15:38:20 +02:00
										 
									 
								 
							 | 
							
								
									
										
									
								
							 | 
							
								
							 | 
							
							
								}
							 |